Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

Finally. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. 1 .Introduction In this tutorial.

2 .

electrical panels. Germany. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. and piping. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. and plumbing engineering workflows. 3 . You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. such as mechanical equipment. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. and plumbing fixtures. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. electrical. Add more detailed modelling elements. Add basic MEP elements. fixtures. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. such as duct.

all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. you learn where the training files are located. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. Metric: files for users working with metric units. When you open a training file. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. is located and accessed in the training files location. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. So. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. templates. NOTE Depending on your installation. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. When you install the training files as instructed. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. annotations. and tags. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . your Training folder may be in a different location. For example. Metric file names have an _m suffix. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. as well as how to open and save them. you can choose to save your work. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. Contact your CAD manager for more information. Create schedules. when you add ductwork. For example. Create detail views. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. However. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. On the Contents tab. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. such as templates and families. views. however. to provide a richer and more finished design. and sheets to document the project. In this exercise. You do not design entire systems. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. After completing each exercise.

rvt and make changes. For example. enter the new file name. For Files of type. 3 In the right pane. and click Save. you are prompted to save the changes.rvt. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. and you can open any supported file type. the Open dialog displays. select the folder in which to save the new file.rvt) is selected.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. scroll down. and click the Training Files icon. Accessing Training Files | 5 . A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. and click Open. You may close the file with or without saving changes. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. a list of file types displays. click ➤ Save As. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Project Files (*. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. double-click Imperial or Metric. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. if you open settings. 8 If you have made changes. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. For File name. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. 4 Click the training file name.

6 .

the door retains this relationship to the partition. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. 2D and 3D view. If you move the partition. and phases when you need it. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. drawings. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. ■ ■ 7 . the floor or roof remains connected. quantities. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. every drawing sheet. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. In this case. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. the operation of the software is parametric.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. drawing sheets. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. In the Revit MEP model. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. and plans. In this case. hence. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. and schedules required for a building project. sections. As you work in drawing and schedule views. You learn the terminology. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. scope. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. schedules. the parameter is one of association or connection. the hierarchy of elements. If the length of the elevation is changed.

For example. tags. and keynotes are annotation elements. When you change something. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. dimensions. and electrical panels.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. boilers. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. sinks. boilers. and electrical panels. tags. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. and reference planes are datum elements. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. sinks. levels. walls and ceilings are hosts. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. ducts. For example. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. grids. Datum elements help to define project context. For example. They help to describe or document the design. dimensions. filled regions. sprinklers. Examples include detail lines. They display in relevant views of the design. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . For example. sprinklers. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. and 2D detail components. ducts. For example. For example.

The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. and types. top of wall. and drawings of the design. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. first floor. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. However. Often. floors. Most often. This information includes components used to design the model. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. If you can draw.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. you do nothing to establish these relationships. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. section views. By using a single project file. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. For example. you must be in a section or elevation view. To place levels. In Revit MEP. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. North . The project file contains all information for the building design. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. families. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. such as roofs. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. from geometry to construction data. views of the project. for example. or bottom of foundation. In other cases. schedules. Project: In Revit MEP. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. elevation views. programming is not required. and ceilings. you can explicitly control them. some terms are unique to Revit MEP.

hiding. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. pipes. A type can also be a style. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. For example. and wires. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . such as a 30” X 42” title block. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. showing. and similar graphical representation. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. For example.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. However. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families include ducts. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. Type: Each family can have several types. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. System families can be transferred between projects. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. or layer the views to see only the one on top. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. Unlike system and standard component families. each in-place family contains only a single type. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. You can also display several project views at one time. A type can be a specific size of a family. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. For example. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. Then experiment with them. identical use. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. With a few clicks. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system.

To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. To return the panel to the ribbon. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file.

many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. tools used for running analysis on the current design. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. architect-specific tools.. project and system parameters. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. select the tool first. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed.. and for switching views. When working on the Modify tab. and CAD files. then select what you want to modify. data and systems. and settings. tools used for editing existing elements. tools used for adding 2D information to a design.

Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. To keep a panel expanded. provides requested information. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. For example. By default.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. provides access to common tools. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . closes the application menu (double-click). The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. displays frequently used tools. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. when adding duct.

such as Export and Publish. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. click. (Export) On the application menu. select a template and create a new drawing. select a file to open. (Open) save the current drawing.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands.. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. (Save As) export the current drawing. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name...

(Print) access product and license information. family. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. annotation. saves a current project. provides views including Default 3D. publish the current project. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. but is not enabled by default.On the application menu. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. and Walkthrough.. to. (Publish) print the current drawing. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . enters selection mode and ends the current operation. Camera.. or template file.. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. annotation.. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. To enable or disable a tool item. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. or template file. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. family. click. (Licensing) close the file.

Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. Group. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. repeat the command. Clipboard. When you are using a command. when you switch to another editing mode. or the Family Editor. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. Modify. check the Status Bar. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. In addition. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. Starting with the most recent command.To undo or redo a series of operations. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. To show the Status Bar again. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. workshared components. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). This displays the command history in a list. To hide the Status Bar. Clear the Status Bar check mark. However. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. displaying the same information. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. When you are highlighting an element or component.

On the Quick Access toolbar. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . click (Modify). To change existing elements to a different type. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. When you place an element in a drawing. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type.To cancel or exit the current command. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. Place a Wall. select one or more elements of the same category. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. for example.

it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. click Training Files.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. For example. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. 1 Click ➤ Open. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. After you are familiar with these tasks. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. Zoom the view In the tutorials. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .rvt. There are several ways to access zoom options. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. In the following steps.

8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. Modifying the View | 19 . Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. click . click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. this is referred to as a crossing selection. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. the view zooms in on the selected area. 9 To display SteeringWheels. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. on the Navigation bar. In the drawing area. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. When you release the mouse button. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. 6 Click in the drawing area. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. NOTE As you zoom in and out. To modify or add snap increments.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. If you do not have a wheel mouse. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar.

the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. and click tin the Options dialog. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . press ESC. To define settings for SteeringWheels. As you move the mouse. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. Click and drag to orbit the design. 14 To exit the wheel. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. click the SteeringWheels tab. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. moving the wheel to the desired location. ➤ Options. and then using the Zoom tool again.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. For more information about SteeringWheels.

and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. Small blue dots.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. display along the ends. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials.HVAC Plan . display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. After you are familiar with these tasks.Design ➤ Floor Plans. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. These are the drag controls. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. 2 Enter ZR. referred to as shape handles.Design. called drag controls. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . bottoms. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Similar controls. as shown. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. and select the duct. and open Level 2 .

All changes you make to a project are tracked. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). on the Standard toolbar. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. click the Undo command. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . or press CTRL+Z. 6 On the Undo menu. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. select the first item in the list.3 Click and drag the bottom control. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. Move. In this example.

8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. Some commands. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. In this case. After selecting the element to move. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. as shown. require 2 clicks to complete the command. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . and drag it to the left as shown. 11 With the duct already selected. you want to move the duct. and click again to specify the ending position. for example. The duct is moved to the new position. click to specify the starting position. 10 Move the cursor to the right. such as Move and Copy.

Click OK. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. Select Mechanical . 14 Enter VG.End a command Some commands. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog.Return. 13 To end a command. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. such as the Modify Ducts command. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. For example.Supply. Press ESC twice. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

under Template file. 5 In the New Project dialog. settings. In that case. 27 . 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise.rte template. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. system families. use copy/monitor. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. such as ducts and pipes. and click Open. and geometry from the starting template. 6 Click OK. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. click Training files. select Project. You can either select a template from the template library. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. You can choose from several templates. the default building levels and standard views. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. under Create new. and open Imperial ➤ Templates.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. such as the default project units and settings. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. create and manage views. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and loadable families. Finally. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. you learn how to start a project from a template. New projects inherit all the families. link files. 2 In the New Project dialog. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. such as coordination review and interference checking. click Browse. and modify system settings.

10 Using the same method. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. for Energy Data. Click OK. ■ ■ Under Create new. select Manchester. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. under Energy Analysis. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. you can select it now. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. review the construction materials listed. 8 In the drawing area. select Level 1. NH. select Project template. When you select the material. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. In the Choose Template dialog. For example. click Edit. click Browse.7 In the Project Browser. Click Cancel. navigate to Imperial Templates. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. and open North. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. for City. For Location. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. select School or University. If you want to use a template other than the default. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. click (Browse). 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . ■ For Building Construction. Click OK twice. (Browse).rte template and click Open. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. create another new project using the Construction template. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project.

19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 26 In the right pane. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . click Round. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 4 1/2". Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. 5 1/2". ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. For Categories. under Duct Settings. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. Click OK twice. 33 Click OK. under Pipe Settings. piping. for 3 1/2". Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. click Rectangular. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. 22 In the right pane. Holding CTRL. 4 1/2". and 12 1/2". 10 1/2". power distribution systems. 24 In the right pane. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark.rfa and click Open. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. 25 In the left pane.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. After standard settings have been established for an organization. wiring. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. click Sizes. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. select Views. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. and fire protection systems. for 3 1/2". 23 In the left pane. click Wiring. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. and 5 1/2". and demand factors for electrical systems. under Duct Settings. select Identity Data. 11 1/2". plumbing. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. for 3/4". ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 27 Click OK.

under Create new. For Then by. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. select Family and Type. 4 In the New Project dialog. under Template file. To enable this coordination. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. For Sort by. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. For Then by. click Training. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. 38 Close the file. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. families. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. 2 In the New Project dialog. From the Positioning list. sheets. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. Select Ascending Click OK twice. select Auto . select Associated Level. Notice that the file is saved as a template. select View Name. You need to create the MEP model for the project. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. Click Open. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. Linking Projects In this exercise. click Browse. 5 Click OK. and groups that are contained in a project. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. In addition.Origin to Origin. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. select Sub-Discipline. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. select Project.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. select Type/Discipline and click Edit.rvt.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

and click Open. and select it as the library path. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. 15 Under Library Name.11 In the Places dialog. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. Save. and Import dialogs. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. click My Library. ➤ Open. click the My Library icon. templates. click (Add Value). Load. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. and click OK twice. or families. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. and click (Browse). and change the name to My Library.

select Ignore words in uppercase. click Edit. custom color files. click OK. 5 In the text editor. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. 9 In the text editor. 12 Create a new project using the default template. and decal image files. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 14 Click in the drawing area. This path is determined during installation. such as bump maps. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. 21 On the File Locations tab. If you want to relocate this path. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. 27 Click OK. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. click Places. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. click the Spelling tab. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. view the current path. click Edit. 22 Select My Library. 2 In the Options dialog. If you work in a large office. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 20 Click ➤ Options. (Remove Value) to delete the library. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 19 Click Cancel. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 11 In the Options dialog. 3 Under Settings. specify the new location here. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 23 Click 24 Click OK. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check.

Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. and enter 1 . 19 In the Options dialog. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. you modify snap settings. under Dimension Snaps. 24 In the Options dialog. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 22 In the text editor. you modify snap increments.. 6 In the Snaps dialog. 4 In the New Project dialog.17 In the Spelling dialog. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. 25 Close the file without saving it. 23 In the text editor. You can turn snap settings on and off.rte. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . As you zoom in and out within a view. click OK. click Close. click Browse. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 20 Under Settings. click Training Files. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. work with snapping turned off. click Edit. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 18 Click ➤ Options. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . click the Spelling tab. click File menu ➤ Save. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. In this exercise. click OK. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. delete sheetmtl-CU. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 21 Under Personal dictionary. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click Restore Defaults. under Template file. 2 In the New Project dialog.

snapping reverts to the system default settings. This is the increment that you added previously. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. For example. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. deselect Chain. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. and move the cursor to the right. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. such as ZO to zoom out. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. TIP To zoom while sketching. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. enter SM.7 Under Object Snaps. click OK. If it does not. If you do not have a wheel button. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. While sketching. 10 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Snaps dialog. use the wheel button on your mouse. zoom out until it does so.

the midpoint. 25 Click OK. it will snap to the endpoints. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. Do not set the wall end point. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 22 Move the cursor downward. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 26 Close the file. If you move the cursor along the wall. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. and specify the wall endpoint. and delete the value 1’ . Notice that snapping is once again active. with or without saving it.. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 19 Enter SM. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. and the wall edges. and move the cursor to the right. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall.

You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. 43 .Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial.

44 .

In this exercise. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. By following the recommended workflow. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. 45 . go to http://www. water source heat pump (WSHP). At the end of the tutorial. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. If the tutorial training files are not present.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you can choose to save your work. In this lesson. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. After finishing each exercise. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. methodology. you design a mechanical system for an office building. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. you will understand the process. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. you first plan the system. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. duct system and a hydronic piping system. As you create the mechanical system.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. This system consists of a cooling tower. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. and then you create a plenum level. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment.autodesk. However. After applying a color scheme to the zones. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you first configure the linked architectural model.

and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. and click OK. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection.Space Plan is highlighted. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. Next. and after the linked model highlights. These components are defined in the architectural training file. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. ceilings. roof. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. select Room Bounding. NOTE When working with a linked file. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. click to select it. you add a level for plenums.rvt. click Training Files. 1 In the Project Browser. under Constraints. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. not in the MEP training file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. In this section. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. 9 On the Draw panel. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). and in the Plan View Types dialog.6 In the Project Browser. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. The new level is placed. enter 8'.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). and double-click West . Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. and enter Level 2 Plenum. Preparing Spaces | 47 . 16 Press Esc. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. and click OK.MEP. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. For Offset. Click Plan View Types. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks.

NOTE After finishing each exercise. select Plenum Plan. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. for Level. In this exercise.Plenum. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. and click Properties. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. and for Offset. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. enter an Offset of 1' 0". you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. you can choose to save your work. For Cut plane. 20 In the Project Browser. and then place spaces in various types of areas. Under Identity Data. ■ Click OK twice. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. select Level Above (Level 3). select Design. for View Range. For View Classification. enter 0. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. In the next exercise. and click Apply Default View Template. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. However. for View Scale.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. select MEP . for Top. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . For Sub-Discipline. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. for Default View Template. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Under Extents. right-click Level 2 Plenum. click Edit. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. you place spaces in areas of the building model. right-click Level 2 Plenum. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. Under View Depth.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. select Horizontal. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. select Level 2 Plenum. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. For Offset. walls. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. click Training Files. Placing Spaces | 49 . select New. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. enter 0. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. For (Tag Location). 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared.rvt. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. and ceilings).Space Plan is highlighted. For Space. For Upper Limit. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

enter Library. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. for Number. Click OK. For Name. 9 Select the space. 14 In the drawing area. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view.7 Click to place the space. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. ensuring coordination between the files.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. enter 219. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. select Level 3. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. For Upper Limit. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. and then click Modify. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. 21 Using the method learned previously. enter 0.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Placing Spaces | 51 . 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. For Offset. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected.

This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. you place a space in a large corridor area. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 25 Close the file with or without saving it. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. and then split the space using a space separation line. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. under Energy Analysis. 23 Click OK. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared.22 In the Instance Properties dialog.

and for Offset.Space Plan is highlighted. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down.rvt. enter 0. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. 5 On the Options Bar. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . for Upper Limit. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select Level 3.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and then press Esc. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel.

If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. which was numbered 219Q. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 10 Using the same method. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. the plan view would have updated with the changes. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. as shown. 9 In the floor plan. and scroll to the newly placed space. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. double-click the space name. In the schedule. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes.7 In the Project Browser. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. change the space number to 216A. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. and press Enter. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . enter Corridor. 11 Close the schedule view.

17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. place a space in the lower area of the split space. 16 Using the method learned previously. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space.15 Press Esc twice.

you place a space in a chase. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint.Space Plan is highlighted. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. If necessary. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section.rvt. click Training Files.

On the Options Bar. For Limit Offset. select the space. for Upper Limit. click in the chase area to place the space. select Interior and Reference. enter 4'. 10 In the plan view. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. For Number. enter 0. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. for Upper Limit. and then click OK. enter 225PC. select Roof Level. In the plan view. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For Offset. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. right-click. 6 Enter VG. for Name. and click Element Properties. enter Chase. select Level 3. 12 Click in the section view. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. expand Spaces. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. 8 Enter WT to tile the views.4 Press Esc. Under Identity Data. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints.

All spaces in the view are tagged. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. floors. 17 Type ZF. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. ceilings. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Space Plan. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and maximize the view. In the next exercises. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. under Loaded Tags. 15 Press Esc. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and click OK. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. select Space Tag With Volume.Bounding elements (such as walls.

In this exercise. To display space reference lines. click Reference. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building.Zoning is highlighted. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. click View ➤ Zones. which removes the space from the Default zone. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. it is automatically added to the Default zone. under Spaces. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. After a space is placed in an area. click Training Files. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Right-click in the System Browser.

indicating that it’s the active view. and a new zone is created. click Training Files. The Zone tool is active. select Computer Lab 222. 4 In the drawing area. Using the Edit Zone tab. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 121 Cafeteria. under Spaces. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. and modify the zone properties. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.Zoning is highlighted. Next. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. click Reference. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. The graphic in the System Browser updates. and Electrical 220 spaces. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. To display space reference lines. and click Finish Editing Zone.5 In the System Browser. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. and verify the zones in the System Browser. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. Instruction 221. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. As you do this. under Energy Analysis. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. select Occupiable. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you assign spaces to zones in the building. you assign spaces to a zone. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. the Edit Zone tab displays. you can add or remove a space from the zone. indicating that the space is occupiable. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space.

To view the zone in the drawing area. Click OK. you need to activate the zone visibility. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. Instruction. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line.In the System Browser. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). type VG. 5 With the drawing area active. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. Expand HVAC Zones. select HVAC Zones. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 .

TIP After you finish editing the zone. click Finish Editing Zone. 9 In the System Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Zoning. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . In this exercise. click Training Files. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. under Identity Data. 11 Close the System Browser. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. for Name. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). indicating that it’s the active view. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. under Spaces. click Reference. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. You activated zone visibility in the views.rvt. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. and verify the zone in the System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand 2 . enter 2 . NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.Area B. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. To display space reference lines.West .West .Zoning is highlighted. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building.

Zoning floor plan. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.Zoning view. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. Verify that the distance is 1/2". and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone.5 Click in the Level 1 . 9 With the Add Space tool active. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. Select Attached End. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 .Zoning view. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone.Zoning view to activate it. 8 In the Level 1 . 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. zoom out. click in the Level 2 . 15 Press Esc. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 .

you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click OK.East. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. and zone information.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise.rvt. double-click the zone tag. click the corner where the Top.Zoning view. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. In this exercise. double-click Level 1 . for Name Value. space. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. you verify the building. on the ViewCube. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 .Zoning to make it the active view. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. enter Lounge . Front. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. click Training Files. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i.

The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. Next. Click (Highlight). The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. With 109 Lounge selected. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. click (Isolate). The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. Using the Highlight tool. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . you isolate the space. verify that Wireframe is selected. and select 109 Lounge. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view.

Next. ■ ■ ■ Next. and then click OK. and click OK. For Electrical Loads. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. click . Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). Below the list of spaces and zones. select Lounge/Recreation. the space information displays for the selected space. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. For Construction Type. and then click OK. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. For People. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select 109 Lounge. select 1_South_Lounge. and in the People dialog. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. click . click . and in the Electrical Loads dialog. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space.■ On the Details tab. scroll down in the left pane. verify that <Building> is selected. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space.

Below the list of spaces and zones. Next. floors. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. 12 Using the methods learned previously. click (Shading). verify that 74. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information.00 °F : 54. and dehumidification set point. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. and other room-bounding components. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. For Heating Information. This indicates the heating set point.00 °F : 90. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. heating air temperature. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. roofs. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. This indicates the cooling set point. cooling air temperature. For Cooling Information. the zone information displays for the selected zone. verify that <Building> is selected. verify that 70. and air changes per hour. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. and humidification set point.00 °F : N/A is specified. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type.00 °F : N/A is specified. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. outdoor air per area. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. This indicates the outdoor air per person.

Under Energy Analysis. For Offset. click Cancel. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum).Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Plenum. Click OK. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Under Energy Analysis. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. select Level 3. enter 212P. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select Plenum. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. For Name. Because this is an unoccupied space. enter 0. 15 In the Project Browser. for Number. open MEP . 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis.

NH. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. for City. double-click Level 2 . under Energy Analysis. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. In this exercise. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. click in the Value field. For Location. enter 03101. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building.Space Plan. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Energy Data. space. and verify that the space has replaced the void. is selected. On the Place tab. and select space Plenum 212P.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . For Postal Code. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Training Files. verify that Manchester. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. you verified building. click Edit. select School or University. and zone information. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis.

verify that New Construction is selected. enter 150 Btu/h. select Heated and cooled. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. 8 In the drawing area. this option adjusts the times automatically. select Specified. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. verify that 1' 0" is specified. For Project Phase. verify that Occupiable is selected. In order to select a space. for Values. Select Area per person. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. and click OK. for Building Service. and enter 50 sq.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. For Ground Plane. select Library . under Volume Computations. and click OK. Click OK twice. select Specified. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Under Heat Gain (per Person). ft. right-click.Audio Visual. For Building Construction. If. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. or neither. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. ■ On the Weather tab. you need to select this option. For People. verify that Level 1 is selected. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). For Condition Type. click Edit. a cooling load. click in the Value column. and click Element Properties. verify that <Building> is specified. both. and click OK. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. For Sliver Space Tolerance. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. For Latent. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. and then click . For Sensible. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. select space Library 219. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. enter 200 Btu/h. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. For Space Type. for Values. For Export Complexity. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy.

it should be corrected before you calculate loads. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. click Information). For Location. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. and under Heating Information. Click OK twice. select 219 Library. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. verify that School or University is selected. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. for Values. Under Power. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. for Values. There should be no warnings displayed. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. NH. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. For Electrical Loads. verify that Manchester. Select the space associated with the warning. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and click OK. click Calculate. click Edit. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. select Actual. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. 12 Click the Details tab. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. Next. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. and click to learn the cause for the warning. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. You should correct the space error in the building model. You have verified the building information. For Building Service. verify that <Building> is specified.■ ■ ■ Click OK. and can be modified here. is specified. select Actual. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. For Building Construction.

click to the right of the building to place the legend. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. or zone information. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. Click OK. 16 After you review the loads report. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. 15 Review the loads report for project. In this exercise. 21 Click OK. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. 3 In the drawing area. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. 17 In the loads report. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library.rvt. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. and a loads report displays. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . select HVAC Zones. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. select 219 Library. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. For Color Scheme.Space Plan. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. or make any changes to the model. and zone information for the building model. space. under Energy Analysis. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . space. 19 In the drawing area. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. weather.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed.

under Schemes. The new scheme displays in the view. in 1-ton increments. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. select Tonnage Range.5 Zoom in to the legend. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . and click OK. select the color scheme legend.

add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 11 Using the method learned previously. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type.The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.

Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model.Space Fill is the active view. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. select New Construction. For Phase. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. select Spaces.12 Close the file with or without saving it. for Select available fields from. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. click Training Files. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. In the next exercise. more category options are available. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. Select Schedule building components. For Name. In this exercise. Click OK. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter Space Airflow Schedule. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements.rvt. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. select Spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system.

For Then by. Header. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. Click OK. select Airflow Delta. For Fields. In the Fields dialog. ■ Click Calculated Value. select Level. select Air Flow. and click OK.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. and Blank line.■ Under Available fields. In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Number. enter . You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. Select Ascending. For Formula. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. For Type. In the Calculated Value dialog. select Level. select Not Between. For Discipline. and then click Conditional Format. and then click . and then select Hidden field. enter Airflow Delta. Select Formula. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. click (Browse). for Formula. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select HVAC. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. select Calculated Supply Airflow. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. In the next lesson. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. verify that Show is highlighted. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. select red. In this exercise. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. a view opens that contains the selected space. right-click to access schedule properties.■ ■ ■ For Value. and click OK. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. For Background Color. ■ The schedule displays. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. click the color swatch. Click OK twice. In later exercises. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . 7 Close the file with or without saving it. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. In the Color dialog. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. Under Conditions to Use. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel.

78 .

As you place the air terminals. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. Then. you modify air terminal parameters. After system creation. and work with the airflow schedule. After completing the air systems lesson. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. In this lesson. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. you will create supply air systems. 79 .

and scroll to space 223. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. 3 In the ceiling view. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. When you highlight a space using the cursor. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. the space crossing lines display. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . 5 Select space 223 in the schedule.

and press Enter. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. the hosted elements are updated as well. enter 425 CFM. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. select the diffuser.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. verify that Constrain is cleared. for Flow. 15 On the Options Bar. If the host element is modified or moved. type 12. and then press Esc to end the command. 17 Move the cursor down. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. Also. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. and then select both Copy and Multiple.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. which in this case is the ceiling grid. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . as shown.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . 13 On the Options Bar. and select Supply Diffuser . click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and press Enter. 9 On the Placement panel. The schedule updates with the new flow data. click Place on Face. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.Rectangular Face Round Neck .

select each of the 5 supply diffusers. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. 28 On the Placement tab. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. and then press Esc. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. click Yes. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. 24 In the Open dialog. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. 27 Select Return Diffuser . 25 In the drawing area. 22 In the drawing area. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. Next. As you place the return diffusers. as shown. clear Leader. and click Open. 21 On the Options Bar. 29 Place 2 diffusers. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. click Place on Face.rfa.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select one of the diffusers. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines.

and click to select the lines. select one of the return diffusers. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . 32 In the Project Browser. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. for Reference. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. click Yes. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 31 In the alert dialog. select Strong Reference. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. Level. as shown. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. and click OK. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. under Other.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. For the start point. and click OK. 44 Zoom in to space 115. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . for Constraints ➤ Offset. enter 9' 0"2750.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. ■ ■ For the end point. click the Level 1 line. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. Verify that the measured distance is 9'.

Design is highlighted. In this exercise. However. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. You then create the logical connection between the system components. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . right-click the title.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment.HVAC Plan . including energy analysis. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections.Press Esc. indicating that it’s the active view. After creating the logical connection. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. When you highlight a space. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. and click View ➤ Systems. click Training Files.rvt. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. the space crossing lines display.

select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. and Flow value. Connect Into. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. As you add diffusers to systems. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. 6 Keep the System Browser open. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 15 Click Cancel. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. 12 In the System Browser. System Name. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. On the Options Bar. 11 In the drawing area. review the Number of Elements. the number of elements is updated.

access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. which updates the name in the System Browser. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. for System Name. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. 22 Click OK. the air terminals are the children. 25 Click OK. and the system connects them. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. for Mark. In this exercise. you also use the System Browser to validate systems.17 Using the method learned previously. In this exercise. 18 Click OK. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. 26 Click Finish Editing System. Rename the system Next. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. under Identity Data. under Mechanical. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP.

for Solution Type. the Network type provides several solutions. In this case. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 4 In the drawing area. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch).rvt. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 5 On the Options Bar.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it.HVAC Plan. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . and display solution 1. When you highlight a space using the cursor. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. select Network.Design is highlighted. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. the space crossing lines display. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the upper left diffuser. Also. A Generate Layout tab displays. which provides various layout tools.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. click Modify. Click OK. For Flex Duct Type. as shown. For Offset. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. enter 3'. For Offset. Select Branch. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures.7 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. For Duct Type. enter 9' 10 1/2".Round. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . For Duct Type. enter 9' 10 1/2". 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. you’ll get an error in a later step. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. click Settings.

The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. or manually modify the duct. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Either relocate the system components. For example. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added.11 Click Finish Layout. as is the elbow itself. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. or offset elevations are incorrect. select a different layout solution.

fittings. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. select By View. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. select Duct Color Fill . and click OK. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. highlight a segment of the main duct. a disconnection exists. and then click OK. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog.Flow. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. and equipment. Using a flow-based color scheme. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. and click to select it. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. for Color Scheme. Usually. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. The first time you press Tab. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. under Graphics.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. but not all values are used in this view. for Values Displayed. If the entire network does not highlight. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. thus it is not part of the system.

select the color scheme legend. select the WSHP. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. under Mechanical . 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. 20 In the drawing area.Velocity. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. for Flow. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP.Airflow. and click OK. select one of the diffusers in the system. and press Enter. and on the Options Bar. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. 26 Click OK. select Duct Color Fill . for Schemes. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 .The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. and then press Esc to clear the selection.

Select Only. highlight a segment of the duct. Click OK. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. and select 16". 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. Select the upper segment of main duct. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. Under Constraints. and then click to select it.08 in-wg/100ft.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). select Calculated Size Only. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. for Branch Sizing. The ductwork and fittings are updated. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. select Friction. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. click Cancel. and drag it to the right. Select Restrict Height. and enter .

Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. pressure. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. Use the information that displays (flow. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . and pressure loss. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. static pressure. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. Using this tool. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. so that you can modify the system design accordingly.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction.NOTE As you inspect a system. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. click Training Files. 35 Click Finish. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. also known as the critical path. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i.rvt.

Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). and select the WSHP. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers.Design is highlighted. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. and click to specify the end of the main duct. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct.HVAC Plan . and click Draw Duct. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel.

right-click the connector grip. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 11 On the Options Bar. NOTE When drawing duct. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. double-click MEP .3D MEP.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . click the corner where the Top. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. 15 On the ViewCube. for Offset. Front. select 9' 10 1/2". select the top right diffuser. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. 14 In the Project Browser. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. and click Draw Duct. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct.

19 In the drawing area. it is considered a closed loop. 22 Using the same method. the color fill indicates the flow value. in space 115. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. The ductwork is automatically created. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). 18 Make the floor plan the active view.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. Also. select the top unconnected supply diffuser.

zoom in to the open end of the main duct. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. and select the top left diffuser. 25 Press Esc. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. You can ignore the warning. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. and click to select it. and then click Modify. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . 30 Press Esc twice.

select a segment of the main duct. for Flow. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. 40 Using the same method. and click OK. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. under Mechanical . and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. clear Restrict Height. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. under Constraints. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct.Airflow. and then click OK. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. such as a plenum. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

In this lesson. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. 109 . Then. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. including 2 base mounted pumps. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. Create return and supply piping systems. and a cooling tower located on the roof. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. Automatically and manually lay out piping. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. click Training Files.rvt. on level 3 of the building model. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you place mechanical equipment. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler.

6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 7 On the Options Bar. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building.2-6 Tons . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.Design is highlighted. verify that Wall faces is selected. as shown. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. indicating that it’s the active view.Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component.High Efficiency . and select WSHP .Horizontal . in corridor 328. NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.Left Return .Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .

10 Select the WSHP.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. click the dimension. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. verify that the WSHP is still selected. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and enter 2'. and in the Type Selector. click the top edge of the WSHP. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. as shown. and click to place the dimension.8 Click the corridor wall face. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.

Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. for Offset.14 Click Modify. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. select the 2 WSHPs. as shown. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. for Water Flow. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. and click to place it in the mechanical room. Under Mechanical. Click OK. enter 9'. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . enter 12 GPM.

The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. including flow and pressure. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. you create the return and supply piping systems.21 Click Modify. Create the logical connection between the system components. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Create pipes to physically connect the system components. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses.

but without a corresponding system. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. You can create pipes to connect system components. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. Unlike logical connections (systems). where it is easier to review the information. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design is highlighted. click Training Files. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.HVAC Plan . 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 In the System Browser. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. analyses cannot be performed. and click View ➤ Piping. Creating a Piping System | 115 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Mech 330). 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. right-click the Systems column heading.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .

8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. and the Edit System tool is not active. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 12 In the drawing area. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. while pressing Ctrl. Therefore. This display indicates that the system is selected. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. select the boiler. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. As you assign equipment to systems. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Assigning a system component to an existing system. for System Name. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Notice that on the Options Bar. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder.In the System Browser. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. 10 On the Options Bar. select the 2 WSHPs. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system.

and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. 19 In the Project Browser. 17 On the Options Bar. for System Name. under Design ➤ HVAC . Creating a Piping System | 117 . 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.HVAC Plan . 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.13 Click Finish Editing System. double-click Roof . 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.Design ➤ Floor Plans.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. and select the cooling tower. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously.Design. You have created the hydronic return system.

The hydronic supply system highlights in red. 26 Click Finish Editing System.22 In the Select Connector dialog. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . indicating the logical connection. expand the Hydronic Return system category. 25 Select the boiler. In heating mode. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. and click Select. In cooling mode. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 29 Right-click CHWS. and bypasses the cooling tower. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. and click Expand All. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 23 Close the roof plan view. and click OK. 28 Using the same method. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return).

including the flow rate and size of the component. enter 18 GPM.In the System Browser. for Water Flow. expand Piping. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. 32 In the System Browser. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. and click OK. and click Properties. and click OK. under Mechanical. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . 31 In the Column Settings dialog. you can view several parameters. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Column Settings. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. You also manually modify the layout path as required. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser.

the boiler. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. select Mechanical Equipment. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). Notice that all components within the Level 3 . 5 In the Filter dialog. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view.rvt. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. then the Select a System dialog displays.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. click Check None.Design is highlighted. press Tab to highlight the system. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. select CHWR. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red).Mech 330). Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. and click to select it. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. When you draw a box to select components. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. 9 In the Select a System dialog. you can place the cursor over a system component. In the left pane of the Open dialog. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . A system preview displays in red. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 10 Click OK. and click OK.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

14 On the Generate Layout tab. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. It does not reference the architecture.11 On the Options Bar. duct. 13 Click Cancel. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. or architectural components. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. enter 1' 6''. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . select Perimeter. verify that Solutions is selected. click Settings. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. For Inset. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. structural beams.

View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. and the flow for the other is 12. 17 Optionally. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. the flow for one WSHP is 18. 19 In the drawing area. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. and press Tab 3 times. With each Tab.16 Click Finish Layout. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. to display the path with thinner lines. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler.

under Mechanical. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. 24 Press Esc.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. and click OK. and access its instance properties. 23 Under Mechanical. 22 Select the boiler. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. and click OK.

29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 27 On the System Tools panel. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . On the Options Bar. which propagates flow throughout the system.Design. the Number of Elements is now 8. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . double-click Level 1 . Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. 28 In the Project Browser. click Edit System. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. Next. Logically. you physically close the CHWR loop. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. 32 Click Finish Editing System.HVAC Plan .26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below.

The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. select a WSHP. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. and click Cancel. under Mechanical. 35 Using the drag control. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. 38 Using the same method. access its instance properties. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. as shown.

The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component.40 In the Select a System dialog. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. 41 Click OK. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. enter 0''/12''. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. enter 1' 6''. and then click OK. For Inset. Click Settings. select Perimeter 1 of 5. select CHWS. For Slope.

you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. 48 While pressing Ctrl. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. (Both sections are at the same elevation.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). 46 Click Modify. as shown. In a later exercise. 47 In the drawing area. as shown.

To create the piping system. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. or offset elevations are incorrect. Add piping to close the supply loop. or manually modify the pipe. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping.50 Using the same method. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. 51 Click Finish Layout. Either relocate the system components. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. select a different layout solution.

Design is highlighted. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple.Design ➤ 3D Views.rvt. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and the return pipes are magenta. In the left pane of the Open dialog.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. As you work in the training file. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. as shown. double-click 3D HVAC Building. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D.HVAC Plan . 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

as shown.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. 7 In the plan view. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the section of piping. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. 6 Press Delete.

■ Click to move the piping. select the boiler. Click to specify the reference point. and press Esc to clear the selection.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. ■ Move the cursor up 4''. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . 9 In the 3D view.

You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. and click Draw Pipe. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. 13 In the plan view. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. The connections are automatically created. select the return pipe riser. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. and the lower one is secondary. select the boiler. and click OK. 12 In the 3D view.

the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. enter 1' .7''. and press Enter. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. enter 2'. ■ Move the cursor down. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. for Offset. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 .In a plan view. and you select 1 connector. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right.

19 In the plan view. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and the appropriate fittings are created. and select it.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. As you place piping runs that are close together. 18 Press Esc twice. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. select the primary base mounted pump. and click OK. as shown. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''.

and click the minus symbol. click to connect to the pump. and click Draw Pipe. you select the tee fitting. 29 If necessary. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. and when the connector point displays. 27 Move the cursor to the right. and click to draw the pipe. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . right-click the bottom connector.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. 28 Press Esc. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections.

31 On the Options Bar. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. 33 Press Esc.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. for Offset. enter 4'. select the primary base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe. and click to create the pipe. right-click the discharge connector.

upgrade the fitting to a tee connector.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. 35 Using the method learned previously. as shown. these pipe connections were created automatically. 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 .

type 1'. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . for Offset. and click to create the pipe. ■ ■ On the Options Bar.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. enter 9' 6''. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. and press Enter. ■ Move the cursor down. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. right-click the bottom control on the tee. and click Draw Pipe.

You now have a closed loop system. right-click. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. and click Element Properties. Next. you validate the flow through the system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 .37 Click Modify.

43 Press Esc. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . 41 Using the same method. the value is 0 GPM. and click OK. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. select the cooling tower. 44 In the 3D view. Connect the cooling tower Next. as shown. 46 Press Esc. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. notice that under Mechanical. right-click. view the properties for the secondary pump. under Mechanical. When you create the pumps in parallel. 48 In the plan view. and click Element Properties.50 or 50% of the Flow. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). notice that Flow is 125 GPM. under Mechanical. 40 Click Cancel. 42 Click OK.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. The flow is being propagated through the piping. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. for Cooling Water Flow. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. In the Instance Properties dialog. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 .■ Lower pipe (outlet). NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. 49 Press Esc. Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system.

click Training Files.50 In the 3D View. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. select the cooling tower. the water bypasses the cooling tower. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. When the valve is open.rvt. and is heated by the boiler. Adding Valves In this exercise. and close the dialog.

2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. indicating that it’s the active view.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that the Diameter value is 3''.HVAC Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Valves | 143 .Design is highlighted. 8 Press Esc twice. and select Ball Valve . 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. The bypass valve is closed by default. as shown. 4 On the Options Bar.

Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. place another Ball Valve .2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. parallel to the previously placed valve. 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 12 Select Ball Valve . 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 14 Using the same method.10 Press Esc.

and select Ball Valve . validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. Adding Valves | 145 . For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). and click OK. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. (This valve allows the water to flow through it.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 20 Select the bypass valve. under Mechanical. right-click. and select Ball Valve . You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. In heating mode. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. and click Element Properties. 19 Using the same method. verify that Flow is 0 GPM. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve.

HVAC Plan . click Training Files. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser.22 Using the method you just learned. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing.Design is highlighted. Initially. as shown. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . indicating that it’s the active view. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters.rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. Sizing Pipe | 147 .Size. and click OK.Flow. select Pipe Color Fill . and click OK. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. for Schemes.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. click Pipe Color Fill .

press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). Select And. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. 13 Press Esc.25 FT/100ft. and enter 2. Click OK. for Branch Sizing. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. Under Constraints. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. and click to select the branch. enter 5 FPS. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. select Friction. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. and for Velocity.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Either relocate the system components. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. Using the System Inspector. 14 Close the file with or without saving it.Design ➤ 3D Views. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. Inspecting the System | 149 . pressure. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. Inspecting the System In this exercise. click Training Files. or manually modify the pipe. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. or offset elevations are incorrect. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. select a different layout solution. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow.

The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as required. and pressure information including pressure loss. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. flow.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. An inspection flag reports the section number. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. This information helps you modify the system design.

targeting those systems that need attention. you need to validate them. the Static Pressure is 7. and click OK. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 9 Using the same method. inspect Section 6 again. select 90° F.89 psi. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. and to size pipe. and the Pressure Loss is 1.67 psi. for Fluid Temperature. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. In this exercise. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. as shown. Checking Piping Systems | 151 .Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level.88 psi. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. 10 Click Finish.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project.

The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. 4 In the System Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click Show to view all of the system components.Design. and for pipe sizing. Warnings display.HVAC Plan .rvt.HVAC Plan . all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. As you learned when placing components. the pipe is associated with that system.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 6 In the Project Browser. For example. In the System Browser. 7 In the System Browser. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. 9 Right-click CHWS. click Training Files. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected.Design ➤ Floor Plans. If you place components without assigning them to a system. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder.Design. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. After you have assigned all components to systems. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. thus assigning the components to a system. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. right-click the Systems titlebar. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and click View. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. and double-click Level 3 . The dashed red lines represent the logical connection.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. After you assign components to a system. double-click Level 1 .

14 Using the methods that you learned.HVAC Plan . 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . 15 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click Hydronic Return. 12 In the System Browser. 13 Right-click CHWR.Design floor plan. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. click Close. and click Expand All. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. otherwise. and select Level 3 . The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. 10 Using the same methods. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. and confirm unassigned system components. expand the Unassigned folder.TIP If you have multiple views open.

154 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system. 155 .Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial.

156 .

Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Define required lighting. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 .

click (Open). In this exercise you review electrical settings. click Training Files. Click OK. For Temperature. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Material. select 90. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. You also add a wiring type. select Wiring Types. select Copper. distribution systems. and demand factors that are applied in the design. wiring. ■ Click New Correction Factor. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. speeding up the design phase. select Copper. enter THHN. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. For Temperature Rating. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. enter 1. select 75.04. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. As you place components and create circuits. ■ ■ For Factor. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. expand Wiring . Select Correction Factor.Wire Sizes.rvt. ■ ■ For Material. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. enter -5 fc and 5 fc. for Custom Colors.■ ■ For Value. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . ■ ■ In the Color dialog. select Red. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. Click Background Color. Click OK three times.

you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. Create power loads. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. 167 . as you place lighting fixtures. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. Then. power circuits.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. First. Use the System Browser to check your design. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. Create a panel schedule.

■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . Under Scheme Definition. for the Spaces Category. By using orange as the color for this range. click Training Files. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. You can create additional color schemes.00 fc. select Average Estimated Illumination. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. Click OK. In the Color dialog. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the color for Less Than 20.rvt.Lighting Color Fill view is open. select Orange. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. for Basic Colors. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .00 fc. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. select the color legend. 2 In the drawing area.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click (Open).

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .7 In the Project Browser. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. The red field will clear once the +/.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. 13 Click the Level 2 . indicating a value greater than 0 fc. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area.5 fc range is satisfied.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. which is the lowest value in the specified range. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update.277. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view.5 fc range. 8 In the Project Browser. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. zoom to space Library 219.Lighting Ceiling plan. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format).

24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click OK. select Multiple.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. 20 Select the lighting fixture. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 25 On the Options Bar. the fixtures will move accordingly. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Click to place the fixture.

select the 3 fixtures. select Multiple. 28 In the drawing area. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . 30 On the Options Bar. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 27 Press ESC to end the command.

172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.32 Press ESC. Note the value in red for the space Library 219.

select Lighting Fixtures. 36 In the Filter dialog. 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) .35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Check None.277V. Click OK. and for Category. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 .

The values in the schedule are updated automatically. 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the changes for the space Library 219.

41 On the Options Bar.277V. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 . 42 In the drawing area. 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. The lighting delta is satisfied. select Multiple Alignment. Note the changes for the space Library 219. click the ceiling grid line as shown.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) .

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. The fixture aligns.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog.45 Press ESC to end the command. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. In the next exercise. you modify the light fixture IES files. click (Open). Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise.rvt.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser.Lighting Color Fill plan. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 2 Tile the views as shown.Lighting Plan. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. scroll to view space space Library 219. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Click OK.00 VA. Under Identity Data. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. and click OK. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. ■ Click Apply. ■ Click OK twice.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. click the value for Initial Intensity. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog.85. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown.93. Under Electrical. select Xenon and click OK. select Luminous Flux. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. ■ Under Photometrics. for Apparent Load. click the value for Light Loss Factor. click the value for Initial Color. for Color Preset. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . for Lamp. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. for Ballast Loss Factor. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. Under Photometrics.ies and click Open. enter 162. specify 15000. In the Name dialog. In the Select File dialog. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . select T5 [HO]. enter .277V and click OK. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture.00 lm. enter F15. enter . Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. Under Photometrics. select 463T5_S. for Type Mark. Under Photometrics.

10 In the Filter dialog.277V. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. select Lighting Fixtures.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Check None. and for Category. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. Click OK. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures.

16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type.Press Delete. Note the lighting delta updates again. select the top center fixture. 15 In space Library 219.

Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown.17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. Placing Switches. 2 In the drawing area. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP.rvt. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. you add switches. and receptacles to your design. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. Junction Boxes. In the next exercise. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. Placing Switches. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Open). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and Receptacles | 183 .Press Delete. Junction Boxes. junction boxes.

it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.277V. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 7 Click to place the switch. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor .

Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.rfa and click Open.NoLoad. and Receptacles | 185 . 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector. Placing Switches. The element type Junction Boxes . Junction Boxes. 12 In the Load Family dialog. 9 Press ESC to end the command. Select Junction Boxes .8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown.

17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. for Mark. 21 In the drawing area. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. for Level 2 . 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.14 Press ESC to end the command. enter 9’0”. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . you can enter a space to separate the unit values. NOTE When entering values. 15 Select the junction box. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter JB-1NL. Click OK twice. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. Under Electrical. In the Type Properties dialog.Offset. note the Number of Poles is 1. Click Edit Type. zoom to space Library 219. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser.

NOTE If necessary. Click OK. right-click and click Column Settings. Space Name. Select Size. and Voltage. 23 In the System Browser. Distribution System. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Select Load. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Expand General. Junction Boxes. Expand Electrical. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. Placing Switches. and Number of Elements. 26 In the System Browser. Space Number. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. and Receptacles | 187 . expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. 24 For any column.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank.

31 Close the System Browser. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. Junction Boxes.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. select Copy and Multiple. Placing Switches. 38 Select the receptacle. 40 On the Options Bar. and Receptacles | 189 .

41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. move the cursor along the wall. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle. 42 Move the cursor down. and enter 12’ and press ENTER.

Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 191 .43 Press ESC to end the command. Placing Switches.

45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.

you need to create logical connections to define the topology. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan.48 Close the file with or without saving it.

You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). click (Open). and work toward the higher voltage. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i.equipment. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .rvt. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. zoom to the space Electrical 220. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 2 In the drawing area. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. Adding wiring to a project is optional.

13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . For Panel Name. 14 Select the panelboard. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 9 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Options Bar.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . enter 20. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. #1 Pole Breakers. for Distribution System.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. select 120/208 Wye. for Distribution System. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . Click OK.Surface: 100A. for Max. select 480/277 Wye. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. enter PP-2B. 7 Press ESC to end the command. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown.Loads. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . 8 Select the panelboard.

21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. zoom to space Instruction 221. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.Loads. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. click Check None. 20 In the drawing area. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. for Max. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. enter LP-2B. Click OK. and for Category. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. which is the logical connection between the elements. #1 Pole Breakers. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. For Panel Name. enter 20. Click OK. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 23 In the Filter dialog.

26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.

30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way. 33 Select the switch on the right. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 32 Press ESC.28 Press ESC to end the command. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 35 Select the left three-way switch. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit.34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down.

44 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. 38 Press ESC to end the command.Loads. Click OK. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Next you create circuits without showing wire. enter 2. click (Open). Click OK. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Hot Conductors.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. except without wire. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 41 In the Filter dialog. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . click Check None. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and for Category. select Wires.

13 In the System Browser. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. and then expand circuit 1.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. click Training Files. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Expand Electrical. and Voltage Drop are selected. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. Rating. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space.rvt. 2 In the drawing area. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. Voltage. Distribution System. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. right-click on the Systems heading. expand Power. Click OK. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. and verify that Load. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. zoom to space Computer Lab 222.

22 With the junction box still selected. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 30 Close the System Browser. change the Voltage to 277V. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Click OK. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. under Electrical. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors.

32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 35 Press ESC to end the command. click below the first one to place it. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. note the label parameters and click Cancel. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. Click Yes. under Identity Data. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. Click Tags. 47 In the drawing area.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 40 Click OK twice. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. click Edit Type. enter FR4. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. for Type Mark. Click OK. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar.

50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. select Break. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. 56 In the Filter dialog. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. click Check None. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. enter a comma. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. Next you create a switch system. and click Apply. select Lighting Fixture Tags. Click Save. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Click OK. for File Name. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. and for Category. Click OK. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.rfa. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. Click OK. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 52 In the Save As dialog. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. For Circuit Number. Deselect Break and for Suffix. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family.

2 In the drawing area. enter a. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. Creating a Switch System | 205 . Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. for Switch ID. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.rvt. Click OK. click (Open). under Electrical Lighting. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch.

25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System.Lighting. for switch ID. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. enter b. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. under Electrical .

click Check None. Click OK. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 7 In space Electrical 220. select the PP-2B panel. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. Circuits are used for power. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Next you create a circuit and size wire. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i.26 Close the file with or without saving it. click (Open). In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Filter dialog. and data systems. select Electrical Fixtures. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. click Training Files. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Creating Power Loads | 207 . and for Category.rvt. lighting. 2 In the drawing area.

and in the drawing area. Click OK. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. select Wiring. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. under Electrical . and click Element Properties. and in the right pane. enter 2. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks.rfa. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 19 Click OK. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. and click Open. for Hot Conductors.Loads. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. select Long Wire Tick Mark. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 13 Select the wire again. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 15 In the Load Family dialog.

select the PP-2B panel. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. and click to select the circuit. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Creating Power Loads | 209 . press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. as shown. 22 In space Electrical 220.

29 In space Instruction 221. 28 In the drawing area. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. in space Instruction 221. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click the connector of the first receptacle. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222.26 Press Delete. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. as shown.

click Open. zoom to space Electrical 220. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . Next you balance the loads for your design. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222.rvt. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. Finally. click Training Files. 3 In the Electrical space. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select panel LP-2B. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. 2 In the drawing area. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes.

and Phase C provides 2028 VA. Phase B 3636 VA. 1-#10.3616 VA).4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . 1-#12. for Rating. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 12 Select panel PP-2B. click Rebalance Loads. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 1-#12. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. Notice that the loads on Phase A. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. Click OK. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. Scroll down. 6 Click OK. 1-#10. 14 Close the warning dialog. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. Under Electrical-Loads. B. enter 30A.3712 VA. and Phase C .

and click OK. 17 Close the warning dialog. and click OK. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. for Rating. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. click Training Files.15 Select panel PP-2B. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. enter 25A. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Select PP-2B. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. for Rating. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. under Electrical . under Electrical . click (Open). 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection.Loads. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. Next you create a panel schedule. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK.Loads. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 .rvt. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. enter 30A. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1.

for Font. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Font Size. Under Body Text. and open E601 . 11 Click OK twice. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. click Training Files. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Other.Panel Schedules. expand Sheets (all). click Edit. click (Open). for Appearance. Under Header Text. select Berlin Sans FB. 4 Close the report. 5 In the Project Browser. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. Next you use the System Browser to check your design.rvt. enter 3/32. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. for Font Size. 6 In the Project Browser. 7 Select the schedule. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Bold and Italic. Under Header Text. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. enter 1/8. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays.

The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. press TAB once. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. In the System Browser. In the System Browser. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. Expand Unassigned. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. each with a load of 180VA. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. select space Lounge 212. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Checking Your Design | 215 .View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits.

15 In the dialog. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 18 Select panel LP-2C. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 20 On the Options Bar. for Panel. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 16 Close the details dialog. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. select MDP-1. under Warnings. 17 In the drawing area. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. zoom to space Electrical 214. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 .

218 .

In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. 4 In the Name dialog. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. 219 . click Duplicate. and click OK. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Sanitary. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. you create a PVC pipe type. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files. and click Properties. planning is critical to a successful design. In this lesson. type PVC . Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. in addition to loading existing families. right-click PVC . Adding a pipe size. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. and verify that Level 1 .rvt.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.Vent.Plumbing Plan .Design is open. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i.

PVC .5 In the Type Properties dialog. Tap. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected.DWV: Standard. enter 10°.Vent is listed. 15 For System Type. 17 In the left pane. under Mechanical. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. enter -4' .PVC .Sch 40 . Cross. 6 Click OK. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. 10 On the Selection panel. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. click Training Files. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. enter 27/32''. In the Project Browser. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes.rfa. click Pipe Settings. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. enter 5/8''.Sch 40 . Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . select Sanitary. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . select None. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. 26 Click OK. and click Main. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog.Sch 40 . DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. and click OK. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . select Tee.DWV: Standard. under Pipe Types.PVC . 25 For Outside. For Offset. for Nominal. Tee.DWV. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings.0''. 18 For System Type. select Plastic. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . click Modify. PVC . 21 In the right pane. for Material. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 24 For Inside Diameter. select Tee Vent . 27 For the new pipe size. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. 22 Click New Size. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. select Branch. enter 1/2''. select Sanitary. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 13 In the right panel.

sanitary piping.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. Create the cold water system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. vent. including plumbing fixtures. 221 . add a hot water heater. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. Create the sanitary plumbing system. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. and hot and cold water piping. Create the hot water system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. you add 2 toilets. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. click Training Files. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. including the men’s room (space Male 107).Design is open. NOTE To identify a space name and number. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Plumbing Plan . and verify that Level 1 . 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. 1 urinal. as shown. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. select Public .Flush Valve . in the Type Selector. 5 On the Placement panel.Wall Mounted. 4 On the Element panel. 1 wall-mounted urinal. as shown.1. under Water Closet . and 3 sinks. against the left wall. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.6 gpf.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .) 8 Press Esc. select 3/4'' Flush Valve. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. above the first in the standard toilet space. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces.Wall Hung. zoom in closer. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector. under Urinal .7 Click to place another toilet. use the reference line to center the fixture. and press Esc. (Again.

under Floor Drain . 12 On the Placement panel. In placing the fixture. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 .2'' Drain. select 5''x5'' Strainer . click Place on Face. 14 Click Modify. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain.Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector.Rectangular.

a urinal. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and review the components listed under this system. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. and click View ➤ Piping.rvt. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. right-click in the System Browser table heading. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. and a floor drain. and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. In this exercise. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors).Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227 .Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Plumbing Plan . open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 6 In the plan view. and click OK. draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. 8 In the Filter dialog. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 2 In the Project Browser. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner.Design is open. and verify that Level 1 .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. Only plumbing fixtures are selected. clear Lines (<Overhead>). and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

for System Name. 12 On the Edit System panel.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. expand Sanitary. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. 11 On the Options Bar. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. enter Sanitary 107. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. so the Create Sanitary System is available. If you deselected the drain. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. 13 In the Systems Browser. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. You include the bathroom space number in the name. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. click Finish Editing System.

17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. and click OK. 16 In the Select a System dialog. A preview of the piping layout displays. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. select Sanitary 107.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. The base is placed. a toilet. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . as shown. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. for example. select one of the components in the system. at the midpoint of the detail lines.

25 On the Options Bar. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. select Branch. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. and click OK. The default settings are automatically modified. for Solution Type. select 4''. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. for Offset. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 21 On Options Bar. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work.19 On the Options Bar. click Solutions. enter -1' 0''. and for Offset. enter -4'-0”. and modify it to meet project requirements. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. 26 On the Options Bar. You accept this suggested solution. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 27 Click Modify. 23 For Offset. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. enter 1/8'' / 12''. select Intersections. for Diameter. for Slope. 24 In the left pane. enter -1' 0''. select Main. and click Settings.

29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. select the vertical route path segments. and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .

31 Click Modify. as shown.30 In the 3D view. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. use the ViewCube to orient the view. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main.

34 On the Generate Layout panel. click Finish Layout. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet.33 Using the previous method.

and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. select the fitting and click to reorient it. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. When a fitting is reversed.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view.

as shown. 38 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. you continue with the work from the last exercise. adding sinks in the men’s room. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. and check the slope control.

Design ➤ Floor Plans.Public. as shown. in the Type Selector. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). In the left pane of the Open dialog.Rectangular.Plumbing Plan . 5 On the Placement panel. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected.rvt. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 4 On the Element panel.Design is open. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. select 22''x22'' . 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and verify that Level 1 . click Training Files. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line. under Lavatory .

TIP When entering dimensions. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. select Multiple. On the Options Bar. For example. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. and press Enter to create a second sink. enter 2' 4''.7 Click Modify. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 8 Select the sink.

Press Esc. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. click Add To System. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. 12 In the drawing area. and press Enter to create the third sink. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 In the System Browser. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. 15 Click the 3 sinks. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. click Finish Editing System. 16 On the Edit System panel.

22 In the plan view. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ 3D Views. as shown. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. under Design ➤ Plumbing . and click Draw Pipe. with the tee fitting selected. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal.In the System Browser. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 19 In the 3D view. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). double-click 3D Plumbing. use the ViewCube to orient the view. 20 Select the fitting. 21 Select the tee.

24 On the Options Bar. 26 On the Options Bar.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. and click Apply. press Spacebar. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. When you press the Spacebar. and click to draw the pipe. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 2' .6''. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. for Slope. In this example. for Offset. enter 1/8'' / 12''. 27 Click Modify.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . move the cursor over the stub pipe. select Standard.DWV. 32 Select the double wye fitting. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 30 In the 3D view.Sch 40 .PVC . under Wye 45 Deg Double . and when the vertical center line displays. 29 In the Type Selector. 31 Click Modify. click to place the fitting.

242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click Draw Pipe. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. double-click the section head to open the section view. on the Options Bar. enter 1'. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. for Offset. 34 Press Esc. In the next steps. and press Enter. you add pipe segments to the double wye. zoom in to the double wye fitting. 36 In the section view. enter 6''. right-click the right connector.33 With the fitting selected. and press Enter. 37 Select the fitting.

■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. 40 Click Modify. 42 Click Modify. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. 41 Using the same method. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. and click to place the pipe. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°).Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. as shown.

enter 6''. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. press Spacebar. 49 Using the same method. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. right-click the bottom connector. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 47 Move the cursor down. 48 Click Modify. and click Draw Pipe. and press Esc.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. 46 In the section view.

place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. 56 Using the same method.DWV. under Trap P . and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. 55 In the 3D view.PVC .50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 51 In the Type Selector. 52 In the plan view. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. 53 Using the same method. 54 Click Modify. select the P-Trap on the left. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . select Standard.Sch 40 . You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks.

Click in the plan view. enter 6''. In the plan view. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. connect the right sink to the double wye. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created.. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. Select the double wye pipe on the left. and click Draw Pipe. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. and press Enter. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Move the cursor to the left. select the left P-Trap. 58 Using the same method. Click Modify. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink.

In the Type Selector. select the section of pipe you just drew. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. under Pipe Types. On the Routing Solutions panel. click Finish to select the recommended solution. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. while pressing Ctrl. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . select PVC Sanitary.■ In the 3D view. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. Press Esc. while pressing Ctrl. and select a proposed solution. as shown. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions.

62 On the Options Bar. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified.rvt. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. and verify the slope. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. adjusting the sanitary stack. click Finish. for Slope. In the left pane of the Open dialog.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. click Training Files. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. 3 In the Section view.Floor level line. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . 9 In the Type Selector. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend . as shown. select the elbow fitting on the right. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. select Standard. and click the intersection to place the fitting. and click Draw Pipe.PVC . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . right-click the top connector.Overall.Plumbing Plan .Design. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 5 Select the tee.Design. 7 On the Selection panel. 10 In the 3D view. and click to draw the pipe. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing.DWV. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38. select the vertical stack. click Modify.Sch 40 .Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 .

select Standard. 12 Select the fitting. 15 Press Esc. and click the rotate control to change the orientation. under Plug . for Offset. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.11 Click Modify. 17 In the Type Selector. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe.Sch 40 .DWV. as shown. 18 In the plan view. 13 Click the rotate control once. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .PVC . enter 1'-0”. 14 On the Options Bar.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251 . 20 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise.19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.Design is open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . click Training Files.Plumbing Plan . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i. and verify that Level 1 .

for System Type. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. select Branch. select Pipe Types: Water. select Plumbing Fixtures. 4 In the right pane. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. verify that the value is 9' 0''. and for System Type. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. 9 In the left pane. select Branch. select Domestic Hot Water. click Check None. double-click 3D Plumbing . minimize the Sanitary system. select Main. 6 In the left pane. 17 In the Filter dialog. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.) 10 Click OK. expand Unassigned. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Domestic Hot Water. 7 In the left pane. under Design ➤ Plumbing . expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 15 In the plan view. For Offset. For Offset. urinal. and click OK. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. draw a selection box to select the toilets. select Domestic Cold Water. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. and click Main. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.Overall. if necessary. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. for System Type. select Pipe Types: Water. enter 9' 3''.Design ➤ 3D Views.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . 14 In the System Browser. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. and sinks.

21 On the Edit System panel. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. For Flow Conversion Method. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 .18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. In the System Browser. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. click Finish Editing System. Notice that the water main displays in blue. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 19 On the System Tools panel. click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. enter DCW 107.

enter 10'. and click Draw Pipe. enter 4'0”. connect the second toilet. enter 0”/12”. and click the connector. 31 On the Options Bar. 36 Move the cursor to the left. and press Enter. as shown. and click to place the pipe. at the intersection of the water main pipe. for Offset.2 7/8''. and press Enter. for Offset. 30 In the plan view. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. For Offset. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. enter 7''. right-click the top DCW connector. 37 On the Options Bar. 35 In the Type Selector. under Pipe Types. enter 3' . 33 Click Modify. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. as shown.25 Using the same method. 32 Move the cursor to the right. select Water. select 3/4''. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . For Slope. select the sink above the urinal. 28 In the Type Selector. click to the left of the urinal. 34 In the plan view.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). and click to connect to the main cold water line. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 42 In the Select Connector dialog. select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. 41 Select the top sink. and click OK. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . 40 Click Modify.39 Move the cursor to the left.

connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. you create the hot water system.44 Using the same method. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . add a water heater.

rvt.Overall. 6 In the plan view. select the 3 sinks. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design is open. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. click Training Files. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen.Design ➤ Floor Plans. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Plumbing Plan .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing . Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. expand the Unassigned folder. 5 In the System Browser. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Creating the Hot Water System | 257 . while pressing Ctrl. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. and verify that Level 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.

13 In the plan view. you edit the system to add equipment. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. select 0.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. Default Domestic Hot Water. In later steps. Default Domestic Cold Water. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. in the Unassigned folder. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 10 In the System Browser. as shown.6 Gallon.Tankless. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. for System Name. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. under Water Heater . Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. When designing systems. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. 12 In the Type Selector. 15 In the System Browser. 14 Click Modify. verify that DCW 107 is selected. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). and click Edit System. and click OK. enter Domestic Hot Water 107. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties.

select the water heater. click Finish Editing System. and press Enter. Slope: 0''/12''. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. and on the Edit System panel. right-click the middle left connector. 27 Click Modify. 19 Select the water heater. and select Draw Pipe. 23 On the Options Bar. and click the water main line. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. 26 Move the cursor to the right. Offset: 4' 6''. 24 Move the cursor up. 22 In the Type Selector. as shown. 25 On the Options Bar. enter 1' 6''. for Offset. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. enter 10’.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.

29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 37 On the Options Bar. and for Offset. as shown. click Edit System. 33 On the Edit System panel. 36 Move the cursor down. 38 Move the cursor to the right.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. and in the System Selector. enter 1''. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. select Domestic Hot Water 107. and press Enter. for Diameter. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. and click Draw Pipe. enter 9' 0''. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. select 4'-6''. and on the Placement Tools panel. for Offset. select a sink. click Finish Editing System. enter 1' 6''. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). 30 On the System Tools panel. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 35 On the Options Bar.

41 Move the cursor down. enter 2' 8''. for Offset. 42 Click Modify. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 .39 Move the cursor down. enter 1’. and click just above the bottom sink. 40 On the Options Bar. as shown. and press Enter.

The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal).43 In the 3D view. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

Creating the Hot Water System | 263 . 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.46 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system.

264 .

265 .Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.

266 .

If the tutorial training files are not present. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 2 Right-click Standard. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. However. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model.autodesk. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. After finishing each exercise. In this tutorial. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. go to http://www. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. 267 .rvt. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. In this lesson. you can choose to save your work. and click Duplicate. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You create a new pipe type.

and click Properties. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. For Offset. you modify the type properties of the pipe. and enter Fire Protection Wet. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. 6 In the Project Browser. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. For System Type. However. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. In the next exercise. and then click OK. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. verify that 9' 0" is specified. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 9 Click OK. select Carbon Steel. for Material. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. select Fire Protection Wet. In the left pane. In this exercise. duct. For Pipe Type. select Main. Next. For Pipe Type. For System Type. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. structural beams. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. under Mechanical. verify that 9' 0" is selected. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. click Rename. you create project parameters and work with schedules. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. select Fire Protection Wet. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. or architectural components.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). For Offset. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping.

Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . When you highlight a space using the cursor. For Group parameter under. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and click Element Properties. for Name. under Fire Protection.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select space Instruction 221 as shown. Under Categories. select Fire Protection. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . the space crossing lines display. 5 Click OK twice. and then click OK. select the upper half of the building. 6 In the drawing area. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i.Design is highlighted. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. for Sprinkler Zone. right-click. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data.rvt. enter Sprinkler Zone. click Add. click Training Files. select Spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. enter Zone 1. 8 Using a crossing window.Fire Protection Plan . 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog.

12 In the Instance Properties dialog. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. you create schedules for sprinkler design. to which you add various parameters. for Sprinkler Zone. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. under Fire Protection.rvt. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 In the Filter dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then click OK. select Zone 1. verify that only Spaces are selected.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and then click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Sprinkler Zone. 13 Using the same method. under Fire Protection. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and click OK. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. including a calculated value parameter. click Training Files. enter Zone 2. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. and then access instance properties. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection.

15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 9 On the Formatting tab.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 6 Using the same method. Click OK. select Maximum Spacing. click the Formatting tab. Obstructed-Combustible. and click Field Format. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. for Name. select Length. For Name. enter Light. For Rounding. and on the ribbon. select Spaces. double-click on each column separator.Fire Protection Plan . select Fire Protection. For Key name. 14 Select the new header.Design is highlighted. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. enter 15. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. 7 Click OK. 10 In the Format dialog. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. select To the nearest 1'. In the Maximum Spacing column. select Feet and fractional inches. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Type of Parameter. enter Maximum Spacing. click Add Parameter. Click OK. The schedule displays. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. 11 Click OK twice. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. Select Schedule keys. enter Protection Area Construction Type. indicating that it’s the active view. For Group parameter under. For Units. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 .Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule.

add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. under Available fields. select Spaces. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. Unobstructed Ordinary. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. Click OK. For Name. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. enter 130. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . enter Sprinkler Schedule. and press Enter. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. 16 Using the same method.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. Unobstructed Extra. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. NOTE The units of measure display automatically.

The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Sprinkler Zone. select Area. for Sort by. For Type. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. click . 22 Click OK twice. and click OK. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). For Discipline. and click View Properties. select Minimum Sprinklers. click Edit. For Units. select Level. 19 Click the Formatting tab. For Then by. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. select Fixed. select 0 decimal place. under Other. enter Minimum Sprinklers. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. For Formula. Click OK. Select Header and Blank line. select Common.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. In the Fields dialog. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. 20 On the Formatting tab. Enter the formula operator / after Area. and click Field Format. select Number. for Sorting/Grouping. For Rounding. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 .

select Sprinkler Zone. and then select Hidden field. for Filter. select Level equals Level 2. and select Totals only. click Edit. select Level. At the bottom of the dialog. select Hidden field. ■ In the Format dialog. For Then by (second instance). and click View Properties. select Grand totals. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Number. right-click the schedule. For Fields. 30 Click OK twice. Under Field formatting. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Minimum Sprinklers. 27 In the drawing area. For Fields. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. 26 Click OK 3 times. for Filter by.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. verify that Use default settings is selected. and then click Field Format.

and click View Properties. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. click Edit. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Other. On the Formatting tab. for Available fields.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. For Category. and Count. double-click Type. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Calculate totals. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. for Embedded Schedule. delete the word Maximum. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. and select Totals only. System Name. for Fields. select Sprinklers. Under Field formatting. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. select Embedded Schedule. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . select Grand totals. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. select Count.

for Protection Area Construction Type. select space 221 Instruction. 41 In the plan view.Fire Protection Plan Design. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 50 Access the instance properties. under Identity Data. select Ordinary. and the spacing parameter values are evident. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. and click OK. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Protection Area Construction Type. select Ordinary. select Light. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. under Identity Data. 52 Click OK. and access the instance properties. under Identity Data. double-click FP . 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. Unobstructed. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. Unobstructed. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 43 Click Cancel. 46 With the space still selected. but their values are not determined. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. Unobstructed. As a result.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. 48 In the floor plan. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. select space 221 Instruction. 44 In the schedule.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. As you place the sprinklers. methodology. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. you can choose to save your work.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. you will understand the process. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. In the left pane of the Open dialog. However. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.autodesk. click Training Files. By following the recommended workflow. and double-click Level 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . As you create the system. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. At the end of this tutorial. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial.rvt. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. If the tutorial training files are not present. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. 279 . This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. go to http://www. After finishing each exercise. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans.

3 In the Project Browser. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. When there is a small misalignment. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. After placing the initial sprinkler. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. When this happens. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. while pressing Ctrl. select the sprinklers that you placed. and click to place 3 sprinklers. as shown. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. 10 Press Esc twice.Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. 9 In space Instruction 202.Pendent . and select Sprinkler . 11 In the drawing area. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202.

282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and that Copy and Multiple are selected. you place non-hosted sprinklers. 13 On the Options Bar. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. as shown. Next. and then press Esc.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. Also. verify that Constrain is cleared. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active.

This number is determined in the schedule. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. open Design ➤ FP . click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. for Offset. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". under Constraints. 19 In the floor plan. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. move the cursor to the right. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Next. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . enter 10' 6". and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. 17 In the Project Browser. 18 Type WT. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . you adjust the offset. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. Notice that the schedule updates. and press Enter. 25 Click OK. and click Element Properties.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. and 200C). specify a vertical offset. enter 11. 29 Press Esc. 22 In the 200A Corridor space.FP_Ceiling view. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. you place non-hosted sprinklers.Design. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. For Number. enter 14' 6". 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally.Fire Protection Plan . 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. 200B.

you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and then creating the logical connection between these system components. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. Unlike logical connections (systems). and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP.30 Close the file with or without saving it. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. In the next exercise.Fire Protection Plan . and with piping (physical connection). You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is highlighted. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. After creating the logical connection. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 1 In the Project Browser. However. indicating that it’s the active view. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. click Training Files.rvt.

As you assign sprinklers to systems. 5 Right-click the header. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. click View ➤ Systems. In the System Browser. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. Creating a Piping System | 285 . Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. and select Piping.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. within the Piping Systems folder. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. named Fire Protection Wet. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. as shown.

15 In the drawing area. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. In the left pane. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . For Pipe Type. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. 11 With the system still selected. enter FP Wet_Zone2. press Tab. and number of elements in the system. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. indicating the logical connection. and on the Options Bar. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. Next. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. The Edit Piping System panel displays.Wet is selected. 13 In the System Browser. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. and a piping layout preview displays. verify that Main is selected. click Settings. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. For Offset. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. select an initial piping layout. select Branch. and click Select. place the cursor over a sprinkler. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. for System Name. system equipment. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. The Generate Layout tools are activated. and select the system. 19 Click OK. 12 On the Options Bar. verify that 9' 0" is specified. providing system editing tools. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. 14 Click Finish Editing System. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial.

In general. select 2". and green represents branch lines). The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. click Solutions. When the layout is finished. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. click Place Base. enter -12' 0". 23 For Offset. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. 22 On the Options Bar. verify that Network is selected. for Diameter.20 On the Generate Layout panel. and select solution 5. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. as shown. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions.

All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. as shown.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. On the Generate Layout panel. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . click Modify. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. 29 Click Finish Layout. A (parallel movement control) displays. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created.

and various manual pipe creation tools.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. 32 If necessary. or manually modify the pipe. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. select a different layout solution. Next. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. and then you create piping to physically connect them.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . Either relocate the system components. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. the Connect Into tool. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . or that offset elevations are incorrect.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design is highlighted. and select the elbow fitting as shown. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 3 If necessary. 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 2 Zoom in. click Training Files. 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Fire Protection Plan .

12 On the Options Bar. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. air terminals. and select solution 5. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. or a system component to display system tools. 9 On the Edit System panel. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. 8 In the corridor. 5 In the drawing area. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. radiators. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. verify that Solutions is selected. 14 Close the System Browser. verify that Network is selected. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. click Add To System. and so on) are logically connected by a system. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. 18 Click Finish Editing System. 13 Click Finish Layout. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. click Finish Editing System. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. and pipe or duct is created. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. mechanical equipment. you can select the pipe or duct. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). for Solution Type.

21 In the Piping Plan. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. 27 On the Options Bar. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added.20 Open Design ➤ FP . for Offset. right-click. 23 View the result in the 3D view. 25 Select the sprinkler. select 9'. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. and then tile the views. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. and then press Esc. 28 In the drawing area. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 29 Using the same method. 24 In the Piping Plan. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . and click Draw Pipe.

zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Because the whole system highlights. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. 31 In the plan view.Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view.

Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area.rvt. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe.Fire Protection Plan . select 1/4" = 1'-0". verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . ■ 6 Press Esc. for Scale.Design is highlighted. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . double-click on the section head to open the section view. click Training Files.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. 4 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .21 On the Options Bar. for Diameter. select 4". The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes.

and maximize the floor plan. 24 In the drawing area. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. and then tag the piping as shown. 23 Close the 3D view. 26 Using the same method. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. for Diameter. 25 On the Options Bar. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 .22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. select 1 1/4". The pipe diameter is modified. as shown. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs).

In this exercise. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. you created a wet fire protection system. For additional practice. You added tags to pipes.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. In this tutorial. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems.

add annotations and dimensions. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. create details. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. 305 .

306 .

and click OK. under Floor Plans. matchlines. right-click Level 1. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. right-click Copy of Level 1. dependent views. 307 . 2 In the Project Browser. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. and apply a view template. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. and click Rename. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. and view references. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. click Training Files. If the view included detail graphics. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template.rvt. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Properties. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. more focused. and then press Esc. click Training Files. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings.5 In the Instance Properties dialog.rvt. 10 In the drawing area. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. and click Rename. 4 Using the same method. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. and click OK. as shown. 3 In the Rename View dialog. views and put them on the sheet. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. 9 Click OK. create dependent views for areas B and C. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 6 In the Project Browser. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click Apply Default View Template. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline.

select Double Dash 5/8". apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. 20 Select the upper view reference and. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. for Target view. 21 Using the same method. select black. and then press Esc. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline./ ---). In the Color dialog. For Line Pattern. For Line Weight. 13 Press Esc twice. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. click the current value. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. 19 In the drawing area. 14 Click Finish Matchline. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. Click OK. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . select 11. and click OK. on the Options Bar. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A.

The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. as shown. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. 27 Using the same method. and zoom to each of the view references. 25 Using the same method. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A.

29 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Zoom in. right-click Plumbing Isometric . click Training Files. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. enter Plumbing Isometric . 4 In the Project Browser. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . select Plumbing. For Sub-Discipline. select Documentation. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently.rvt.Domestic Water. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i.Domestic Water. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for View Name. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. The section crop lines no longer display. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. and select the section box. right-click 3D Plumbing. and click Apply Default View Template. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. and click Properties. 6 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. For Default View Template. Click OK. and click to select it. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. Under Graphics. for View Classification. select Plumbing Isometric. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping.

and then click OK. and click to select it. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". press Tab 3 times. Click Apply. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. 12 Using the same method.9 Right-click. select 3. select Dash. For Pattern. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight.

14 Right-click. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. and click to select it. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. as shown). and click Hide in View ➤ Elements.13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks.

17 Label the fixtures as shown. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. press Tab 3 times. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. In the drawing area. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. On the View Control Bar.Sanitary Waste. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar.15 Press Esc. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . On the View Control Bar. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. click Reveal Hidden Elements. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . 18 Using methods learned previously. Right-click.Domestic Water view with detailing. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click to select it.

the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. select To the nearest 1/8". In the Format dialog. Creating Callout Views | 315 .Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. you use a plan view to create a callout view. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. and then place the callout view on a sheet. 25 Press Esc twice. verify that Common is selected. for Rounding. When the view is associated with a sheet. as shown. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. click on the Format value. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. and click to place the spot slope annotation. 21 Click OK twice. For Slope.

rvt. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). 5 On the Options Bar. select 1/4"=1'-0''. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. for Scale.

change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. 13 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. double-click M601 . Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. using the same method. select 5. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. drag it to the sheet. for Line Weight. Creating Callout Views | 317 . Click OK.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it.

For Title on Sheet. and select the viewport. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. and click Apply Default View Template. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. enter WSHP PART PLAN. Click OK. For Default View Template. right-click the callout view.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 17 In the Project Browser. for View Name. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine.

Creating Callout Views | 319 . The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section.Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers.

23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 25 In the Project Browser. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. under Names. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. 26 In the Rename View dialog. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. and click Apply View Template. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. right-click the detail view. and click Rename. enter Typical WSHP Detail. and click OK.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click OK. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 29 Close the file with or without saving it.

linetypes.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. symbols. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. and annotation to create a legend. 321 . and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. ■ work with model-based components. duct tags. you learn how to: ■ add text notes.

you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall.Creating Annotations In this exercise. as shown. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. 8 With the text still selected. click Training Files. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.rvt. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i.

13 Press Esc to clear the selection. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. and a segment of rectangular duct. a segment of round duct. 15 On the Options Bar. Creating Annotations | 323 . select a supply diffuser. 16 In the drawing area. verify that Leader is cleared. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. a return diffuser. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. as shown. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. and then click Right Straight.9 Press Esc twice.

21 In the Load Family dialog. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. and click OK. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. for Ducts. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. click Load. under Category. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. and click Open.rfa. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. 24 On the Options Bar. If necessary. clear Leader. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 20 In the Tags dialog. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 17 Click Modify. 22 In the Tags dialog.

specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. Leader. 32 In the drawing area. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. Creating Annotations | 325 . open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. as shown. 31 On the Options Bar. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct.25 In the drawing area. 26 On the Options Bar. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and then press Esc. select Horizontal. and Attached End.

34 In the drawing area. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. select Free End. for Leader. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. as shown.33 On the Options Bar.

and lock lighting fixtures. and click OK. Creating Dimensions | 327 . Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. 37 In the drawing area. lay out.36 Press Esc twice. you use temporary dimensions to locate. for Leader Arrowhead. not simply an instance property. select Dot Open 1/16". 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. select the last tag placed. and all elements of that type are affected. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. That’s because you changed a type property. 40 Using the method learned previously. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown.

Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. 12 Press Esc. select the dimension line. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. In the left pane of the Open dialog. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. On the Options Bar. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures.rvt. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then select the interior face of the wall. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. indicating that it’s the active view. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right.

and offset them 8' from the wall. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. Because the dimensions are locked. and press Enter. Creating a Legend In this exercise. enter 8'. 18 Select the dimension value (7' .13 Using the same method. 19 Using the same methods. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.3 1/2"). 16 Press Esc. and notes. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. annotation symbols. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. click the 3 interior locks on the line. Creating a Legend | 329 . Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. linework.

select Floor Plan. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Scale. click below the title to place the diffuser.8 Neck. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 10 Using the same method. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . For View. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. select 1/4" = 1' -0". Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Click OK. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. click Training Files. enter Diffuser Legend.rvt. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. ■ 9 In the drawing area. 5 Click in the drawing area.

and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. click next to the top diffuser. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. 14 In the drawing area. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Creating a Legend | 331 . and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list.11 Press Esc.

21 Press Esc. 26 Press Esc. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. The selected detail lines are now thin. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 27 While pressing Ctrl. and then press Esc.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 24 Select the component’s break line. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .RISE symbol for the copy start point. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line.DROP and its text note. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror.

and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . and then click Modify. and then click Modify. 34 Using the method learned previously. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. 35 Change the text on the right to N. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. Creating a Legend | 333 .Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down.MECHANICAL LEGEND. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet.30 Select Spot Elevation . 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. enter E.

and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 40 Press Esc. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .39 With the viewport still selected. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.

Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser .113 East elevation view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. and text. A drafting view using detail components. indicating that it’s the active view. 335 . A detail callout that references another view. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram.Detailing 15 In this lesson. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. detail groups. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. click Training Files.

4 On the Options Bar. 8 Using the same method. 7 Drag the Power Riser . and then modify and align the views. place Power Riser .Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser.113 East on the sheet. and click to place it.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select each of the 2 panelboards. Next. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. 5 In the drawing area. clear Leader. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 .113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view.

and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK.9 Press Esc. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . select the 113 North view. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. and click Deactivate View. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. giving the appearance of a single view. right-click. under Identity Data. 13 Right-click. 12 Select the Level 1 line. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Activate View. for Title on Sheet. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right.

Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. select the 113 East elevation view. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 21 Using the drag control. you add wiring to the diagram. In the next exercise. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. 22 Press Esc. right-click. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. as shown. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. 19 Select the Level 1 line. and click Activate View. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.

3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. as shown. 8 On the Options Bar. enter Electrical Power. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 .rvt. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and click OK.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted.113 North view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . As you draw. expand Lines. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. In the New Subcategory dialog. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. In the Line Styles dialog. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. and then click OK. for Line Weight. verify that Chain is selected. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . indicating that it’s the active view. for Name. Under Modify Subcategories. notice that there are no snaps active. select 6. 2 Close the Project Browser. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). 9 Beginning at the transformer. click Training Files. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. click New. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down.

340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . as shown. for Offset. enter 1/8". 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 11 Using the same method.10 Press Esc. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3).

TIP When you use the Trim tool. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. so that the result is as shown. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 .

342 | Chapter 15 Detailing .20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram.

and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center).22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 29 Click Modify. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. 28 Click above the cap. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE.

34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point.31 While pressing Ctrl. select Multiple. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 33 On the Options Bar. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.5. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. and then press Esc. 42 On the Options Bar. for Offset.36 Press Esc. enter 0 0. 40 Press Esc. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . You enter exact values for each line length. and press Enter. enter 3/32". 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 39 Move the cursor to the right. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line.

for Name. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. and then press Esc. 46 In the Project Browser. while pressing Ctrl. click on the length dimension value. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. 50 With the group selected. expand Groups ➤ Detail. and press Enter. Press Esc. and click OK. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. 47 In the drawing area. enter 0 0. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing .125. enter Ground. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. you can ensure that they stay together. select all 3 lines. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. Using the same method.25.

and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 52 Select the detail group. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. TP-2B. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 .51 Using the method learned previously. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. 54 Select the group.

Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. In later exercises. 5 Zoom in to view the section. and click Rename. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. 2 Right-click the copy. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. 3 In the Rename View dialog.rvt. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 4 Right-click the ViewCube. and will place it on sheet E01. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. for Name. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. Back. and then press Esc. and Left sides converge. and then click the corner where the Top.6 Select the section box. 7 On the ViewCube. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . click Home.

Click OK.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. right-click. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. select 3D HVAC Iso. and click Apply View Template. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. select 3D Views. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. Under Names. Walkthroughs.

and click to specify the second leader point. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Typical. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. as shown. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). 15 Using the same method. Move the cursor down and to the left. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. 19 Complete the text labels. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. (Right).14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader.

select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. and then click OK. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. 24 Access the instance properties for the view.To rotate and reposition a text label. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. as shown. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 25 Click OK. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Extents. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. 23 Click on the crop region. select Crop Region Visible. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. and under Extents. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible.

Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 30 Close the file with or without saving it.29 In the drawing area. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. For Scale. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. right-click the view name. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. and click Properties. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. click Training Files.rvt. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. Click OK. select 3" = 1'-0". Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Use detail lines to create a detail group. select the isometric view. Place a detail component. 3 In the Project Browser. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy.

354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select Documentation. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. as shown. 12 On the Element panel. Click OK. for Sub-Discipline. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. For View Classification. 9 Zoom in to the component.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). as the rectangle start point. select Plumbing. click the point at the top of the drain. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 13 In the drawing area. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel.

select the filled region. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . Concrete. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. 21 In the drawing area. and click OK. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. and then press Esc. 20 Select 1.P.I. 23 In the drawing area. 22 Click Modify.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. 18 With the filled region still selected. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. for Type. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. select C. (Line). click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back.

356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew.28 Click Modify. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 34 Press Esc. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Multiple. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. and then click to select them. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 31 On the Options Bar.

41 Type ZF to zoom out. 45 Using the method learned previously. as shown. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. 40 Click Finish Region. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . and then select the side of the slab above the line. (Rectangle). 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. and then press Esc.38 Pan to the other end of the slab.

Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center.. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. enter Flashing Membrane_F. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. and then click to select them. and click OK. 49 Click Modify. select the Flashing Membrane group. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. draw wide detail lines as shown.D. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing .Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. as shown. for Name. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. press Tab to highlight the chain. 52 In the Create Group dialog.

59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 61 Using the same method. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. as shown. Drafting Detail Components | 359 .55 Press Esc. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down.

66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 72 If necessary. 71 Click Modify. as shown.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 64 Press Esc twice. select Leader and Free End. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 67 On the Options Bar.62 Press Esc twice. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. and then click OK. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 70 In the Keynotes dialog. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

80 Press Esc twice. 81 Select the text note. 78 Move the cursor to the left. 76 To select the leader start point. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and click to specify the text insertion point. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right).Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. and click to specify the second leader point. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown.

84 Using the following image as a guide. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . as shown.82 Continue annotating the detail. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references.

89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. open P103 .85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 90 Press Esc. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . and then press Esc twice. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 88 In the drawing area. select the view title. and click to place it.

select Black and White. click Training Files. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD.dwg. For A-----NPP. select Visible. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation.rvt. Click Open. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select 3.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. For Colors. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. Click OK. For Import units. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. For Layers. select Auto-Detect. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Line Weight. you import a CAD detail drawing. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view.

15 Close the file with or without saving it. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . 12 In the drawing area. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. select the viewport title. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport.8 Type ZF. 11 Press Esc. open P103 . and then press Esc. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down.Plumbing Part Plans & Details.

366 .